boiler pump controller technical guide · 2020. 10. 13. · zone zone overview 4 boiler pump...
TRANSCRIPT
Boiler Pump ControllerTechnical Guide
Boiler Pump Controller Code SS1139DT007030-001 Version 100
Zone
Zone
BOILER PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM PART DESCRIPTION AAON PN
Boiler Pump Controller ASM02519Touch Screen Computer PPC V99840CommLink 5 ASM01874IP Module Kit ASM01902
EBC E-BUS Cable Assembly E-BUS Power amp Comm 15 Ft 3 Ft 10 Ft 25 Ft 50 Ft 75 Ft 100 Ft 150 Ft 250 Ft and 1000 Foot Spool
G029440 (15 Ft) G012870 (3 Ft) G029460 (10 Ft) G045270 (25 Ft) G029510 (50 Ft) G029530 (75 Ft) G029450 (100 Ft) G029470 (150 Ft) V36590 (250 Ft) G018870 (SPOOL)
E-BUS Adapter Hub with 15 Ft EBC Cable ASM01635 E-BUS Adapter Board ASM01878
QUALIFIED INSTALLER
IMPROPER INSTALLATION ADJUSTMENT ALTERATION SERVICE OR MAINTENANCE CAN CAUSE PROPERTY DAMAGE PERSONAL INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MUST BE PERFORMED BY A TRAINED QUALIFIED INSTALLER A COPY OF THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE KEPT WITH THE UNIT AT ALL TIMES
WARNING
AAON2425 South Yukon AveTulsa OK 74107-2728wwwaaoncomFactory Technical Support Phone 918-382-6450It is the intent of AAON to provide accurate and current product information However in the interest of product improvement AAON reserves the right to change pricing specifications andor design of its product without notice obligation or liability
AAON PN G076280 Rev 01ACopyright October 2020 copy AAON All rights reserved throughout the worldAAONreg and AAONAIREreg are registered trademarks of AAON Inc Tulsa OKBACnetreg is a registered trademark of ASHRAE Inc Atlanta GAJavatrade is a registered trademark of Oracle IncAAONreg assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this documentThis document is subject to change without notice
wwwaaoncom
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
Zone
Zone
OVERVIEW 4Control System Features amp Applications 4Manual Overview 4
MAIN BOILER PUMP CONTROLLER SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 5Boiler Pump Operation Modes 5Mode of Operation 5Controlling the Operation Modes 5Off Mode 5Run Mode 5Safety Checks 6
INPUTS amp OUTPUTS 7Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs 7
INSTALLATION amp WIRING 8Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring 8Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring 9Boiler Connection Wiring 10Important Wiring Considerations 11Controller Electrical and Environmental Specifications 11
TROUBLESHOOTING 12Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics amp Locations 12Thermistor Temperature Sensor Testing 14Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart 15
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLLER LCD DISPLAY SCREENS 16
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg MSTP CONNECTION TO NETWORK amp BACnetreg PARAMETERS 23
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN OPERATOR INTERFACE MONITORING 29
Zone
ZoneOVERVIEW
4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
Features amp Applications
Manual Overview
This guide will lead you through each section of the Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Below is a quick overview of each section of this manual
Section 1 Sequence of Operations - Page 5mdashThis section contains the sequence of operations for the Boiler Pump Controller and its modules
Section 2 IOs and Wiring - Page 7mdashThis section contains the inputs outputs and wiring for the controller
Section 3 Troubleshooting - Page 12mdashThis section contains sensor testing charts and controller LED diagnostics
Appendix A Controller LCD Display Screens - Page 16mdashThis appendix describes the controllerrsquos LCD screens
Appendix B BACnetreg Configuration - Page 23mdashThis section lists BACnetreg parameters definitions and ranges if applicable
Appendix C Touch Screen User Interface - Page 29mdashThis section gives a brief overview of the Touch Screen user interface for the Boiler Pump Control System
Control System Features amp Applications
The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler
The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS expansion ports which allow for the connection of sensors via EBC E-BUS cables
In addition the Controller and its associated modules contain a 2 x 8 LCD character display with 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display and BACnetreg configuration
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
5
Boiler Pump Controller Operation
Boiler Pump Controller OperationThe Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and provides enable signaling for the boiler
The controller can operate a single boiler package or multiple boilers It can also operate a variable speed pump (with or without a redundant pump) to maintain a designated building pressure differential
Optionally the controller can provide an analog output to the boiler and control the boiler out temperature The controller can communicate via Modbus with the boiler package for status information and can receive a fault indication from the boiler package
Mode of OperationThe boiler pump controller has a power up delay during which no control action can occur This is to allow all input readings to reach a stable state before operation continues
The boiler pump controller has only two normal modes of operation
1 Off Mode
2 Run Mode
The sequence is based primarily on ldquonormalrdquo operation with exten-sions to operation where exceptional conditions are present (safeties)
Controlling the Operation ModesThe two operation modes are commanded by a combination of 4 mode control factors
1 Remote Unit RunStop Input
2 Internal Schedule
3 RunStop override via BACnetreg
4 RunStop override via the User Interface
Off ModeDuring shut down mode the boiler enable output is disabled and then the pump enable outputs are disabled The bypass valve output is then disabled
In off mode the boiler will be disabled and the boiler pump will not run The bypass valve will remain closed until the system is called to run
During off mode no control actions will occur However the con-troller will continue monitoring pressure and GPM inputs for status
Run ModeRun mode consists of the boiler producing hot water and the pump pumping the resulting water through the building hot water loop
The Remote RunStop input on the controller must be activated for the pump to enable and run If it is not active the pump will not run regardless of other commands to do so
Once the Remote RunStop input is activated BACnetreg commands can be issued Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run will make the controller enter the run mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to stop will make the controller shut-down to off mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run automatically will make the controller refer to its internal schedule to determine operating mode The internal schedule by default is ldquorun alwaysrdquo
The BACnetreg default mode being automatic and the internal sched-ule of run always makes the Remote RunStop input act as a true runstop and not just an enable
The RunStop override in BACnetreg and RunStop override via the user interface (UI) affect the same single internal conditional vari-able meaning an override issued by BACnetreg can be canceled via the UI and an override condition issued by the UI can be canceled or altered via BACnetreg
Once the pump is activated to run the boiler will be enabled Initially the runtimes of the pumps will be compared and the pump with the least amount of run time will be allowed to run Its respective louver will be energized Once the louver has enough time to open (based on time delay) the less ran pump will be energized There will be a 10-second delay (adjustable 0-35 seconds) before the pump starts to allow the boiler isolation valve to open
Once the pump starts to run the pump will start its pump VFD output at the starting percentage It will hold at this pump starting percent-age for 30 seconds The controller will confirm that the water flow differential pressure increases by 5 PSI from the off mode readings
If water flow is not confirmed within 30 seconds the pump will be deactivated and locked out If there is a redundant pump pump action will be attempted with the redundant pump
During Run Mode the pump VFD output will be modulated to maintain the designated building differential pressure
If Bypass Valve Control is configured the controller will modulate a bypass valve output to maintain the minimum flow
Once the controller has established which pump has run the least amount and is allowing that pump to run After a week it will be tested again to see if the current running pump is indeed still the least run pump overall if it is not the controller will switch at that time and allow the other pump to come on
Zone
ZoneSECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide6
Boiler Output TemperatureThe Boiler Pump Controller will modulate the boiler output to drive the boiler to control the Boiler Water Out Temperature The Boiler Output Setpoint Range set in the boiler is 80deg to 180deg There are (3) methods that can be used to reset the Boiler Output Temperature within that range With no reset the Boiler Output Temperature will be 80deg
Boiler LoadingmdashThe staging is accomplished through setpoints and when the boiler analog output reaches the max stage percent-age setpoint (default is 80) the controller will hold the analog output there for 40 seconds allowing the 2nd louver to make After the time has elapsed the boiler output will reset to 0 and return to modulating for temperature control After the 2nd boiler time delay (which is fixed) is expired the 2nd boiler will energize Both boilers can modulate together using the same boiler output until they reach max capacity of 100
Boiler UnloadingmdashOnce the controllerrsquos boiler output reaches the min stage percentage setpoint (default of 15) the controller will hold the boiler output at 15 for 40 seconds It will then reset the boiler output back to 100 and allow the first boiler to start to unload from there The 2nd boiler will shut off during this time
1 Writing to the Boiler Output Temperature Reset Point via BACnetreg
The boiler is looking for a percentage from 0-100 value written to this BACnetreg point to reset the output temperature over the 100deg temperature range
If you write a 50() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 130deg
If you write a 100() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 180deg
2 Using the Hard-Wired Boiler Reset Input This 0-10 VDC input will proportionally reset the Boiler Output Temperature between 80deg and 180deg
If you send at 1 VDC signal that will be interpreted as a 10 increase based on the 100deg reset range (10deg) So 10 would be added to the 80deg initial output temperature setpoint to produce a 90deg setpoint
If you send a 5 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 50 to produce a 130deg setpoint
If you send a 10 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 100 to produce a 180deg setpoint
3 Outdoor Air Temperature ResetIf this option is configured the Boiler Output Setpoint will be auto-matically reset between 80deg and a maximum of 130deg based on the outdoor temperature The outdoor air temperature range used for reset is 20deg to 70deg The reset amount equals 70deg minus the outdoor temperature That reset value would be added to 80deg to reset the Boiler Output Temperature
If the outside air is 50deg it will increase the setpoint by 20deg (70deg - 50deg) to a 100deg setpoint
If the outside air temperature was 70deg there would be no reset (70deg - 70deg = 0 reset)
If the Outdoor Air Temperature reset is used in conjunction with the hard-wired Boiler Reset Input then the Outdoor Air Temperature reset value would be added to the Boiler Output Temperature that has been established by the 0 - 10 VDC input signal up to a maximum Boiler Output Temperature of 180deg
If the hardwired Boiler Reset had produced a reset setpoint of 130deg (2 above) and if the outside air is 50deg then 20deg (70deg - 50deg) would be added to the 130deg setpoint to produce a 150deg setpoint
Safety ChecksSafeties represent operating conditions which may override or otherwise affect normal operation Several safeties exist to help stop continued operation when conditions which may harm the equipment are present Activation of safeties will typically trigger an alarm indication both in the Alarm Indicator output and within the BMS communications data
Manual Lockout ResetA manual lockout reset button is available from the Touch Screenrsquos Alarms Screen that will reset and retry all alarms
Boiler Fault 1If boiler 1 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger
Boiler Fault 2If boiler 2 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger
Pump VFD Fault 1A Pump VFD Fault 1 will cause the boiler pump VFD 1 to shut down after 10 seconds
Pump VFD Fault 2If two pumps are configured and the 2nd pump is running a Pump VFD Fault 2 will cause the boiler to shut down the boiler pump 2 after 10 seconds
Pump Operation MonitoringThe Boiler Pressure In and Boiler Pressure Out will be monitored for a differential to determine if the pump is functioning This opera-tion requires a pressure setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run and the boiler differential is less than 5 PSI for more than 5 minutes
Boiler Pump Controller Operation
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
7
Boiler Pump Controller IO Map
InputOutput Maps
See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs
Boiler Pump Controller
Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)
Binary Inputs
1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)
Relay Outputs (24 VAC)
1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)
2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)
3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)
4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)
5 Louver 1 (RLY5)
6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)
7 Louver 2 (RLY7)
Analog Outputs
1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)
2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)
3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals
WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block
DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs
NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor
Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs
Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease
High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down
High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out
Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes
Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler
The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs
The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies
The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg
configuration
See Figure 1 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
9
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller
Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)
See Figure 2 below for output wiring
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10
Boiler Connection Wiring
Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring
Boiler Connection Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board
The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable
The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board
The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200
See Figure 3 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
11
WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications
2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices
3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge
4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire
5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge
6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit
7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used
8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly
Important Wiring Considerations
GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring
WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2
Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements
Con
trol
D
evic
e
Vol
tage
VA
Loa
d
Ope
rati
ng
Tem
pera
ture
Hum
idit
y (N
on-
Con
dens
ing)
Boiler Controller
18-30 VAC (25-15)
Class 215 10degF to
150degF0-95 RH
Inputs
Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor
24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load
Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12
Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows
Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting
POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller
APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly
OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly
WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly
Diagnostic LEDs
ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display
STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
Communication LEDs
EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications
BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications
Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active
Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed
BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open
BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed
BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed
BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed
Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
Zone
BOILER PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM PART DESCRIPTION AAON PN
Boiler Pump Controller ASM02519Touch Screen Computer PPC V99840CommLink 5 ASM01874IP Module Kit ASM01902
EBC E-BUS Cable Assembly E-BUS Power amp Comm 15 Ft 3 Ft 10 Ft 25 Ft 50 Ft 75 Ft 100 Ft 150 Ft 250 Ft and 1000 Foot Spool
G029440 (15 Ft) G012870 (3 Ft) G029460 (10 Ft) G045270 (25 Ft) G029510 (50 Ft) G029530 (75 Ft) G029450 (100 Ft) G029470 (150 Ft) V36590 (250 Ft) G018870 (SPOOL)
E-BUS Adapter Hub with 15 Ft EBC Cable ASM01635 E-BUS Adapter Board ASM01878
QUALIFIED INSTALLER
IMPROPER INSTALLATION ADJUSTMENT ALTERATION SERVICE OR MAINTENANCE CAN CAUSE PROPERTY DAMAGE PERSONAL INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MUST BE PERFORMED BY A TRAINED QUALIFIED INSTALLER A COPY OF THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE KEPT WITH THE UNIT AT ALL TIMES
WARNING
AAON2425 South Yukon AveTulsa OK 74107-2728wwwaaoncomFactory Technical Support Phone 918-382-6450It is the intent of AAON to provide accurate and current product information However in the interest of product improvement AAON reserves the right to change pricing specifications andor design of its product without notice obligation or liability
AAON PN G076280 Rev 01ACopyright October 2020 copy AAON All rights reserved throughout the worldAAONreg and AAONAIREreg are registered trademarks of AAON Inc Tulsa OKBACnetreg is a registered trademark of ASHRAE Inc Atlanta GAJavatrade is a registered trademark of Oracle IncAAONreg assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this documentThis document is subject to change without notice
wwwaaoncom
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
Zone
Zone
OVERVIEW 4Control System Features amp Applications 4Manual Overview 4
MAIN BOILER PUMP CONTROLLER SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 5Boiler Pump Operation Modes 5Mode of Operation 5Controlling the Operation Modes 5Off Mode 5Run Mode 5Safety Checks 6
INPUTS amp OUTPUTS 7Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs 7
INSTALLATION amp WIRING 8Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring 8Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring 9Boiler Connection Wiring 10Important Wiring Considerations 11Controller Electrical and Environmental Specifications 11
TROUBLESHOOTING 12Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics amp Locations 12Thermistor Temperature Sensor Testing 14Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart 15
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLLER LCD DISPLAY SCREENS 16
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg MSTP CONNECTION TO NETWORK amp BACnetreg PARAMETERS 23
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN OPERATOR INTERFACE MONITORING 29
Zone
ZoneOVERVIEW
4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
Features amp Applications
Manual Overview
This guide will lead you through each section of the Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Below is a quick overview of each section of this manual
Section 1 Sequence of Operations - Page 5mdashThis section contains the sequence of operations for the Boiler Pump Controller and its modules
Section 2 IOs and Wiring - Page 7mdashThis section contains the inputs outputs and wiring for the controller
Section 3 Troubleshooting - Page 12mdashThis section contains sensor testing charts and controller LED diagnostics
Appendix A Controller LCD Display Screens - Page 16mdashThis appendix describes the controllerrsquos LCD screens
Appendix B BACnetreg Configuration - Page 23mdashThis section lists BACnetreg parameters definitions and ranges if applicable
Appendix C Touch Screen User Interface - Page 29mdashThis section gives a brief overview of the Touch Screen user interface for the Boiler Pump Control System
Control System Features amp Applications
The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler
The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS expansion ports which allow for the connection of sensors via EBC E-BUS cables
In addition the Controller and its associated modules contain a 2 x 8 LCD character display with 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display and BACnetreg configuration
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
5
Boiler Pump Controller Operation
Boiler Pump Controller OperationThe Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and provides enable signaling for the boiler
The controller can operate a single boiler package or multiple boilers It can also operate a variable speed pump (with or without a redundant pump) to maintain a designated building pressure differential
Optionally the controller can provide an analog output to the boiler and control the boiler out temperature The controller can communicate via Modbus with the boiler package for status information and can receive a fault indication from the boiler package
Mode of OperationThe boiler pump controller has a power up delay during which no control action can occur This is to allow all input readings to reach a stable state before operation continues
The boiler pump controller has only two normal modes of operation
1 Off Mode
2 Run Mode
The sequence is based primarily on ldquonormalrdquo operation with exten-sions to operation where exceptional conditions are present (safeties)
Controlling the Operation ModesThe two operation modes are commanded by a combination of 4 mode control factors
1 Remote Unit RunStop Input
2 Internal Schedule
3 RunStop override via BACnetreg
4 RunStop override via the User Interface
Off ModeDuring shut down mode the boiler enable output is disabled and then the pump enable outputs are disabled The bypass valve output is then disabled
In off mode the boiler will be disabled and the boiler pump will not run The bypass valve will remain closed until the system is called to run
During off mode no control actions will occur However the con-troller will continue monitoring pressure and GPM inputs for status
Run ModeRun mode consists of the boiler producing hot water and the pump pumping the resulting water through the building hot water loop
The Remote RunStop input on the controller must be activated for the pump to enable and run If it is not active the pump will not run regardless of other commands to do so
Once the Remote RunStop input is activated BACnetreg commands can be issued Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run will make the controller enter the run mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to stop will make the controller shut-down to off mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run automatically will make the controller refer to its internal schedule to determine operating mode The internal schedule by default is ldquorun alwaysrdquo
The BACnetreg default mode being automatic and the internal sched-ule of run always makes the Remote RunStop input act as a true runstop and not just an enable
The RunStop override in BACnetreg and RunStop override via the user interface (UI) affect the same single internal conditional vari-able meaning an override issued by BACnetreg can be canceled via the UI and an override condition issued by the UI can be canceled or altered via BACnetreg
Once the pump is activated to run the boiler will be enabled Initially the runtimes of the pumps will be compared and the pump with the least amount of run time will be allowed to run Its respective louver will be energized Once the louver has enough time to open (based on time delay) the less ran pump will be energized There will be a 10-second delay (adjustable 0-35 seconds) before the pump starts to allow the boiler isolation valve to open
Once the pump starts to run the pump will start its pump VFD output at the starting percentage It will hold at this pump starting percent-age for 30 seconds The controller will confirm that the water flow differential pressure increases by 5 PSI from the off mode readings
If water flow is not confirmed within 30 seconds the pump will be deactivated and locked out If there is a redundant pump pump action will be attempted with the redundant pump
During Run Mode the pump VFD output will be modulated to maintain the designated building differential pressure
If Bypass Valve Control is configured the controller will modulate a bypass valve output to maintain the minimum flow
Once the controller has established which pump has run the least amount and is allowing that pump to run After a week it will be tested again to see if the current running pump is indeed still the least run pump overall if it is not the controller will switch at that time and allow the other pump to come on
Zone
ZoneSECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide6
Boiler Output TemperatureThe Boiler Pump Controller will modulate the boiler output to drive the boiler to control the Boiler Water Out Temperature The Boiler Output Setpoint Range set in the boiler is 80deg to 180deg There are (3) methods that can be used to reset the Boiler Output Temperature within that range With no reset the Boiler Output Temperature will be 80deg
Boiler LoadingmdashThe staging is accomplished through setpoints and when the boiler analog output reaches the max stage percent-age setpoint (default is 80) the controller will hold the analog output there for 40 seconds allowing the 2nd louver to make After the time has elapsed the boiler output will reset to 0 and return to modulating for temperature control After the 2nd boiler time delay (which is fixed) is expired the 2nd boiler will energize Both boilers can modulate together using the same boiler output until they reach max capacity of 100
Boiler UnloadingmdashOnce the controllerrsquos boiler output reaches the min stage percentage setpoint (default of 15) the controller will hold the boiler output at 15 for 40 seconds It will then reset the boiler output back to 100 and allow the first boiler to start to unload from there The 2nd boiler will shut off during this time
1 Writing to the Boiler Output Temperature Reset Point via BACnetreg
The boiler is looking for a percentage from 0-100 value written to this BACnetreg point to reset the output temperature over the 100deg temperature range
If you write a 50() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 130deg
If you write a 100() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 180deg
2 Using the Hard-Wired Boiler Reset Input This 0-10 VDC input will proportionally reset the Boiler Output Temperature between 80deg and 180deg
If you send at 1 VDC signal that will be interpreted as a 10 increase based on the 100deg reset range (10deg) So 10 would be added to the 80deg initial output temperature setpoint to produce a 90deg setpoint
If you send a 5 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 50 to produce a 130deg setpoint
If you send a 10 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 100 to produce a 180deg setpoint
3 Outdoor Air Temperature ResetIf this option is configured the Boiler Output Setpoint will be auto-matically reset between 80deg and a maximum of 130deg based on the outdoor temperature The outdoor air temperature range used for reset is 20deg to 70deg The reset amount equals 70deg minus the outdoor temperature That reset value would be added to 80deg to reset the Boiler Output Temperature
If the outside air is 50deg it will increase the setpoint by 20deg (70deg - 50deg) to a 100deg setpoint
If the outside air temperature was 70deg there would be no reset (70deg - 70deg = 0 reset)
If the Outdoor Air Temperature reset is used in conjunction with the hard-wired Boiler Reset Input then the Outdoor Air Temperature reset value would be added to the Boiler Output Temperature that has been established by the 0 - 10 VDC input signal up to a maximum Boiler Output Temperature of 180deg
If the hardwired Boiler Reset had produced a reset setpoint of 130deg (2 above) and if the outside air is 50deg then 20deg (70deg - 50deg) would be added to the 130deg setpoint to produce a 150deg setpoint
Safety ChecksSafeties represent operating conditions which may override or otherwise affect normal operation Several safeties exist to help stop continued operation when conditions which may harm the equipment are present Activation of safeties will typically trigger an alarm indication both in the Alarm Indicator output and within the BMS communications data
Manual Lockout ResetA manual lockout reset button is available from the Touch Screenrsquos Alarms Screen that will reset and retry all alarms
Boiler Fault 1If boiler 1 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger
Boiler Fault 2If boiler 2 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger
Pump VFD Fault 1A Pump VFD Fault 1 will cause the boiler pump VFD 1 to shut down after 10 seconds
Pump VFD Fault 2If two pumps are configured and the 2nd pump is running a Pump VFD Fault 2 will cause the boiler to shut down the boiler pump 2 after 10 seconds
Pump Operation MonitoringThe Boiler Pressure In and Boiler Pressure Out will be monitored for a differential to determine if the pump is functioning This opera-tion requires a pressure setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run and the boiler differential is less than 5 PSI for more than 5 minutes
Boiler Pump Controller Operation
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
7
Boiler Pump Controller IO Map
InputOutput Maps
See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs
Boiler Pump Controller
Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)
Binary Inputs
1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)
Relay Outputs (24 VAC)
1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)
2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)
3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)
4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)
5 Louver 1 (RLY5)
6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)
7 Louver 2 (RLY7)
Analog Outputs
1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)
2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)
3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals
WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block
DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs
NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor
Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs
Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease
High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down
High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out
Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes
Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler
The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs
The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies
The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg
configuration
See Figure 1 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
9
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller
Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)
See Figure 2 below for output wiring
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10
Boiler Connection Wiring
Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring
Boiler Connection Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board
The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable
The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board
The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200
See Figure 3 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
11
WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications
2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices
3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge
4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire
5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge
6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit
7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used
8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly
Important Wiring Considerations
GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring
WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2
Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements
Con
trol
D
evic
e
Vol
tage
VA
Loa
d
Ope
rati
ng
Tem
pera
ture
Hum
idit
y (N
on-
Con
dens
ing)
Boiler Controller
18-30 VAC (25-15)
Class 215 10degF to
150degF0-95 RH
Inputs
Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor
24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load
Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12
Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows
Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting
POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller
APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly
OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly
WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly
Diagnostic LEDs
ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display
STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
Communication LEDs
EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications
BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications
Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active
Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed
BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open
BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed
BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed
BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed
Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
Zone
Zone
OVERVIEW 4Control System Features amp Applications 4Manual Overview 4
MAIN BOILER PUMP CONTROLLER SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 5Boiler Pump Operation Modes 5Mode of Operation 5Controlling the Operation Modes 5Off Mode 5Run Mode 5Safety Checks 6
INPUTS amp OUTPUTS 7Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs 7
INSTALLATION amp WIRING 8Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring 8Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring 9Boiler Connection Wiring 10Important Wiring Considerations 11Controller Electrical and Environmental Specifications 11
TROUBLESHOOTING 12Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics amp Locations 12Thermistor Temperature Sensor Testing 14Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart 15
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLLER LCD DISPLAY SCREENS 16
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg MSTP CONNECTION TO NETWORK amp BACnetreg PARAMETERS 23
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN OPERATOR INTERFACE MONITORING 29
Zone
ZoneOVERVIEW
4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
Features amp Applications
Manual Overview
This guide will lead you through each section of the Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Below is a quick overview of each section of this manual
Section 1 Sequence of Operations - Page 5mdashThis section contains the sequence of operations for the Boiler Pump Controller and its modules
Section 2 IOs and Wiring - Page 7mdashThis section contains the inputs outputs and wiring for the controller
Section 3 Troubleshooting - Page 12mdashThis section contains sensor testing charts and controller LED diagnostics
Appendix A Controller LCD Display Screens - Page 16mdashThis appendix describes the controllerrsquos LCD screens
Appendix B BACnetreg Configuration - Page 23mdashThis section lists BACnetreg parameters definitions and ranges if applicable
Appendix C Touch Screen User Interface - Page 29mdashThis section gives a brief overview of the Touch Screen user interface for the Boiler Pump Control System
Control System Features amp Applications
The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler
The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS expansion ports which allow for the connection of sensors via EBC E-BUS cables
In addition the Controller and its associated modules contain a 2 x 8 LCD character display with 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display and BACnetreg configuration
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
5
Boiler Pump Controller Operation
Boiler Pump Controller OperationThe Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and provides enable signaling for the boiler
The controller can operate a single boiler package or multiple boilers It can also operate a variable speed pump (with or without a redundant pump) to maintain a designated building pressure differential
Optionally the controller can provide an analog output to the boiler and control the boiler out temperature The controller can communicate via Modbus with the boiler package for status information and can receive a fault indication from the boiler package
Mode of OperationThe boiler pump controller has a power up delay during which no control action can occur This is to allow all input readings to reach a stable state before operation continues
The boiler pump controller has only two normal modes of operation
1 Off Mode
2 Run Mode
The sequence is based primarily on ldquonormalrdquo operation with exten-sions to operation where exceptional conditions are present (safeties)
Controlling the Operation ModesThe two operation modes are commanded by a combination of 4 mode control factors
1 Remote Unit RunStop Input
2 Internal Schedule
3 RunStop override via BACnetreg
4 RunStop override via the User Interface
Off ModeDuring shut down mode the boiler enable output is disabled and then the pump enable outputs are disabled The bypass valve output is then disabled
In off mode the boiler will be disabled and the boiler pump will not run The bypass valve will remain closed until the system is called to run
During off mode no control actions will occur However the con-troller will continue monitoring pressure and GPM inputs for status
Run ModeRun mode consists of the boiler producing hot water and the pump pumping the resulting water through the building hot water loop
The Remote RunStop input on the controller must be activated for the pump to enable and run If it is not active the pump will not run regardless of other commands to do so
Once the Remote RunStop input is activated BACnetreg commands can be issued Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run will make the controller enter the run mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to stop will make the controller shut-down to off mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run automatically will make the controller refer to its internal schedule to determine operating mode The internal schedule by default is ldquorun alwaysrdquo
The BACnetreg default mode being automatic and the internal sched-ule of run always makes the Remote RunStop input act as a true runstop and not just an enable
The RunStop override in BACnetreg and RunStop override via the user interface (UI) affect the same single internal conditional vari-able meaning an override issued by BACnetreg can be canceled via the UI and an override condition issued by the UI can be canceled or altered via BACnetreg
Once the pump is activated to run the boiler will be enabled Initially the runtimes of the pumps will be compared and the pump with the least amount of run time will be allowed to run Its respective louver will be energized Once the louver has enough time to open (based on time delay) the less ran pump will be energized There will be a 10-second delay (adjustable 0-35 seconds) before the pump starts to allow the boiler isolation valve to open
Once the pump starts to run the pump will start its pump VFD output at the starting percentage It will hold at this pump starting percent-age for 30 seconds The controller will confirm that the water flow differential pressure increases by 5 PSI from the off mode readings
If water flow is not confirmed within 30 seconds the pump will be deactivated and locked out If there is a redundant pump pump action will be attempted with the redundant pump
During Run Mode the pump VFD output will be modulated to maintain the designated building differential pressure
If Bypass Valve Control is configured the controller will modulate a bypass valve output to maintain the minimum flow
Once the controller has established which pump has run the least amount and is allowing that pump to run After a week it will be tested again to see if the current running pump is indeed still the least run pump overall if it is not the controller will switch at that time and allow the other pump to come on
Zone
ZoneSECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide6
Boiler Output TemperatureThe Boiler Pump Controller will modulate the boiler output to drive the boiler to control the Boiler Water Out Temperature The Boiler Output Setpoint Range set in the boiler is 80deg to 180deg There are (3) methods that can be used to reset the Boiler Output Temperature within that range With no reset the Boiler Output Temperature will be 80deg
Boiler LoadingmdashThe staging is accomplished through setpoints and when the boiler analog output reaches the max stage percent-age setpoint (default is 80) the controller will hold the analog output there for 40 seconds allowing the 2nd louver to make After the time has elapsed the boiler output will reset to 0 and return to modulating for temperature control After the 2nd boiler time delay (which is fixed) is expired the 2nd boiler will energize Both boilers can modulate together using the same boiler output until they reach max capacity of 100
Boiler UnloadingmdashOnce the controllerrsquos boiler output reaches the min stage percentage setpoint (default of 15) the controller will hold the boiler output at 15 for 40 seconds It will then reset the boiler output back to 100 and allow the first boiler to start to unload from there The 2nd boiler will shut off during this time
1 Writing to the Boiler Output Temperature Reset Point via BACnetreg
The boiler is looking for a percentage from 0-100 value written to this BACnetreg point to reset the output temperature over the 100deg temperature range
If you write a 50() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 130deg
If you write a 100() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 180deg
2 Using the Hard-Wired Boiler Reset Input This 0-10 VDC input will proportionally reset the Boiler Output Temperature between 80deg and 180deg
If you send at 1 VDC signal that will be interpreted as a 10 increase based on the 100deg reset range (10deg) So 10 would be added to the 80deg initial output temperature setpoint to produce a 90deg setpoint
If you send a 5 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 50 to produce a 130deg setpoint
If you send a 10 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 100 to produce a 180deg setpoint
3 Outdoor Air Temperature ResetIf this option is configured the Boiler Output Setpoint will be auto-matically reset between 80deg and a maximum of 130deg based on the outdoor temperature The outdoor air temperature range used for reset is 20deg to 70deg The reset amount equals 70deg minus the outdoor temperature That reset value would be added to 80deg to reset the Boiler Output Temperature
If the outside air is 50deg it will increase the setpoint by 20deg (70deg - 50deg) to a 100deg setpoint
If the outside air temperature was 70deg there would be no reset (70deg - 70deg = 0 reset)
If the Outdoor Air Temperature reset is used in conjunction with the hard-wired Boiler Reset Input then the Outdoor Air Temperature reset value would be added to the Boiler Output Temperature that has been established by the 0 - 10 VDC input signal up to a maximum Boiler Output Temperature of 180deg
If the hardwired Boiler Reset had produced a reset setpoint of 130deg (2 above) and if the outside air is 50deg then 20deg (70deg - 50deg) would be added to the 130deg setpoint to produce a 150deg setpoint
Safety ChecksSafeties represent operating conditions which may override or otherwise affect normal operation Several safeties exist to help stop continued operation when conditions which may harm the equipment are present Activation of safeties will typically trigger an alarm indication both in the Alarm Indicator output and within the BMS communications data
Manual Lockout ResetA manual lockout reset button is available from the Touch Screenrsquos Alarms Screen that will reset and retry all alarms
Boiler Fault 1If boiler 1 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger
Boiler Fault 2If boiler 2 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger
Pump VFD Fault 1A Pump VFD Fault 1 will cause the boiler pump VFD 1 to shut down after 10 seconds
Pump VFD Fault 2If two pumps are configured and the 2nd pump is running a Pump VFD Fault 2 will cause the boiler to shut down the boiler pump 2 after 10 seconds
Pump Operation MonitoringThe Boiler Pressure In and Boiler Pressure Out will be monitored for a differential to determine if the pump is functioning This opera-tion requires a pressure setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run and the boiler differential is less than 5 PSI for more than 5 minutes
Boiler Pump Controller Operation
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
7
Boiler Pump Controller IO Map
InputOutput Maps
See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs
Boiler Pump Controller
Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)
Binary Inputs
1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)
Relay Outputs (24 VAC)
1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)
2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)
3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)
4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)
5 Louver 1 (RLY5)
6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)
7 Louver 2 (RLY7)
Analog Outputs
1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)
2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)
3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals
WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block
DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs
NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor
Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs
Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease
High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down
High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out
Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes
Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler
The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs
The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies
The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg
configuration
See Figure 1 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
9
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller
Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)
See Figure 2 below for output wiring
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10
Boiler Connection Wiring
Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring
Boiler Connection Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board
The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable
The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board
The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200
See Figure 3 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
11
WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications
2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices
3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge
4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire
5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge
6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit
7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used
8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly
Important Wiring Considerations
GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring
WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2
Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements
Con
trol
D
evic
e
Vol
tage
VA
Loa
d
Ope
rati
ng
Tem
pera
ture
Hum
idit
y (N
on-
Con
dens
ing)
Boiler Controller
18-30 VAC (25-15)
Class 215 10degF to
150degF0-95 RH
Inputs
Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor
24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load
Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12
Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows
Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting
POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller
APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly
OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly
WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly
Diagnostic LEDs
ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display
STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
Communication LEDs
EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications
BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications
Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active
Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed
BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open
BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed
BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed
BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed
Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
ZoneOVERVIEW
4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
Features amp Applications
Manual Overview
This guide will lead you through each section of the Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Below is a quick overview of each section of this manual
Section 1 Sequence of Operations - Page 5mdashThis section contains the sequence of operations for the Boiler Pump Controller and its modules
Section 2 IOs and Wiring - Page 7mdashThis section contains the inputs outputs and wiring for the controller
Section 3 Troubleshooting - Page 12mdashThis section contains sensor testing charts and controller LED diagnostics
Appendix A Controller LCD Display Screens - Page 16mdashThis appendix describes the controllerrsquos LCD screens
Appendix B BACnetreg Configuration - Page 23mdashThis section lists BACnetreg parameters definitions and ranges if applicable
Appendix C Touch Screen User Interface - Page 29mdashThis section gives a brief overview of the Touch Screen user interface for the Boiler Pump Control System
Control System Features amp Applications
The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler
The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS expansion ports which allow for the connection of sensors via EBC E-BUS cables
In addition the Controller and its associated modules contain a 2 x 8 LCD character display with 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display and BACnetreg configuration
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
5
Boiler Pump Controller Operation
Boiler Pump Controller OperationThe Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and provides enable signaling for the boiler
The controller can operate a single boiler package or multiple boilers It can also operate a variable speed pump (with or without a redundant pump) to maintain a designated building pressure differential
Optionally the controller can provide an analog output to the boiler and control the boiler out temperature The controller can communicate via Modbus with the boiler package for status information and can receive a fault indication from the boiler package
Mode of OperationThe boiler pump controller has a power up delay during which no control action can occur This is to allow all input readings to reach a stable state before operation continues
The boiler pump controller has only two normal modes of operation
1 Off Mode
2 Run Mode
The sequence is based primarily on ldquonormalrdquo operation with exten-sions to operation where exceptional conditions are present (safeties)
Controlling the Operation ModesThe two operation modes are commanded by a combination of 4 mode control factors
1 Remote Unit RunStop Input
2 Internal Schedule
3 RunStop override via BACnetreg
4 RunStop override via the User Interface
Off ModeDuring shut down mode the boiler enable output is disabled and then the pump enable outputs are disabled The bypass valve output is then disabled
In off mode the boiler will be disabled and the boiler pump will not run The bypass valve will remain closed until the system is called to run
During off mode no control actions will occur However the con-troller will continue monitoring pressure and GPM inputs for status
Run ModeRun mode consists of the boiler producing hot water and the pump pumping the resulting water through the building hot water loop
The Remote RunStop input on the controller must be activated for the pump to enable and run If it is not active the pump will not run regardless of other commands to do so
Once the Remote RunStop input is activated BACnetreg commands can be issued Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run will make the controller enter the run mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to stop will make the controller shut-down to off mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run automatically will make the controller refer to its internal schedule to determine operating mode The internal schedule by default is ldquorun alwaysrdquo
The BACnetreg default mode being automatic and the internal sched-ule of run always makes the Remote RunStop input act as a true runstop and not just an enable
The RunStop override in BACnetreg and RunStop override via the user interface (UI) affect the same single internal conditional vari-able meaning an override issued by BACnetreg can be canceled via the UI and an override condition issued by the UI can be canceled or altered via BACnetreg
Once the pump is activated to run the boiler will be enabled Initially the runtimes of the pumps will be compared and the pump with the least amount of run time will be allowed to run Its respective louver will be energized Once the louver has enough time to open (based on time delay) the less ran pump will be energized There will be a 10-second delay (adjustable 0-35 seconds) before the pump starts to allow the boiler isolation valve to open
Once the pump starts to run the pump will start its pump VFD output at the starting percentage It will hold at this pump starting percent-age for 30 seconds The controller will confirm that the water flow differential pressure increases by 5 PSI from the off mode readings
If water flow is not confirmed within 30 seconds the pump will be deactivated and locked out If there is a redundant pump pump action will be attempted with the redundant pump
During Run Mode the pump VFD output will be modulated to maintain the designated building differential pressure
If Bypass Valve Control is configured the controller will modulate a bypass valve output to maintain the minimum flow
Once the controller has established which pump has run the least amount and is allowing that pump to run After a week it will be tested again to see if the current running pump is indeed still the least run pump overall if it is not the controller will switch at that time and allow the other pump to come on
Zone
ZoneSECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide6
Boiler Output TemperatureThe Boiler Pump Controller will modulate the boiler output to drive the boiler to control the Boiler Water Out Temperature The Boiler Output Setpoint Range set in the boiler is 80deg to 180deg There are (3) methods that can be used to reset the Boiler Output Temperature within that range With no reset the Boiler Output Temperature will be 80deg
Boiler LoadingmdashThe staging is accomplished through setpoints and when the boiler analog output reaches the max stage percent-age setpoint (default is 80) the controller will hold the analog output there for 40 seconds allowing the 2nd louver to make After the time has elapsed the boiler output will reset to 0 and return to modulating for temperature control After the 2nd boiler time delay (which is fixed) is expired the 2nd boiler will energize Both boilers can modulate together using the same boiler output until they reach max capacity of 100
Boiler UnloadingmdashOnce the controllerrsquos boiler output reaches the min stage percentage setpoint (default of 15) the controller will hold the boiler output at 15 for 40 seconds It will then reset the boiler output back to 100 and allow the first boiler to start to unload from there The 2nd boiler will shut off during this time
1 Writing to the Boiler Output Temperature Reset Point via BACnetreg
The boiler is looking for a percentage from 0-100 value written to this BACnetreg point to reset the output temperature over the 100deg temperature range
If you write a 50() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 130deg
If you write a 100() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 180deg
2 Using the Hard-Wired Boiler Reset Input This 0-10 VDC input will proportionally reset the Boiler Output Temperature between 80deg and 180deg
If you send at 1 VDC signal that will be interpreted as a 10 increase based on the 100deg reset range (10deg) So 10 would be added to the 80deg initial output temperature setpoint to produce a 90deg setpoint
If you send a 5 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 50 to produce a 130deg setpoint
If you send a 10 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 100 to produce a 180deg setpoint
3 Outdoor Air Temperature ResetIf this option is configured the Boiler Output Setpoint will be auto-matically reset between 80deg and a maximum of 130deg based on the outdoor temperature The outdoor air temperature range used for reset is 20deg to 70deg The reset amount equals 70deg minus the outdoor temperature That reset value would be added to 80deg to reset the Boiler Output Temperature
If the outside air is 50deg it will increase the setpoint by 20deg (70deg - 50deg) to a 100deg setpoint
If the outside air temperature was 70deg there would be no reset (70deg - 70deg = 0 reset)
If the Outdoor Air Temperature reset is used in conjunction with the hard-wired Boiler Reset Input then the Outdoor Air Temperature reset value would be added to the Boiler Output Temperature that has been established by the 0 - 10 VDC input signal up to a maximum Boiler Output Temperature of 180deg
If the hardwired Boiler Reset had produced a reset setpoint of 130deg (2 above) and if the outside air is 50deg then 20deg (70deg - 50deg) would be added to the 130deg setpoint to produce a 150deg setpoint
Safety ChecksSafeties represent operating conditions which may override or otherwise affect normal operation Several safeties exist to help stop continued operation when conditions which may harm the equipment are present Activation of safeties will typically trigger an alarm indication both in the Alarm Indicator output and within the BMS communications data
Manual Lockout ResetA manual lockout reset button is available from the Touch Screenrsquos Alarms Screen that will reset and retry all alarms
Boiler Fault 1If boiler 1 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger
Boiler Fault 2If boiler 2 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger
Pump VFD Fault 1A Pump VFD Fault 1 will cause the boiler pump VFD 1 to shut down after 10 seconds
Pump VFD Fault 2If two pumps are configured and the 2nd pump is running a Pump VFD Fault 2 will cause the boiler to shut down the boiler pump 2 after 10 seconds
Pump Operation MonitoringThe Boiler Pressure In and Boiler Pressure Out will be monitored for a differential to determine if the pump is functioning This opera-tion requires a pressure setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run and the boiler differential is less than 5 PSI for more than 5 minutes
Boiler Pump Controller Operation
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
7
Boiler Pump Controller IO Map
InputOutput Maps
See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs
Boiler Pump Controller
Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)
Binary Inputs
1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)
Relay Outputs (24 VAC)
1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)
2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)
3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)
4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)
5 Louver 1 (RLY5)
6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)
7 Louver 2 (RLY7)
Analog Outputs
1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)
2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)
3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals
WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block
DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs
NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor
Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs
Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease
High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down
High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out
Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes
Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler
The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs
The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies
The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg
configuration
See Figure 1 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
9
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller
Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)
See Figure 2 below for output wiring
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10
Boiler Connection Wiring
Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring
Boiler Connection Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board
The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable
The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board
The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200
See Figure 3 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
11
WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications
2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices
3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge
4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire
5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge
6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit
7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used
8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly
Important Wiring Considerations
GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring
WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2
Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements
Con
trol
D
evic
e
Vol
tage
VA
Loa
d
Ope
rati
ng
Tem
pera
ture
Hum
idit
y (N
on-
Con
dens
ing)
Boiler Controller
18-30 VAC (25-15)
Class 215 10degF to
150degF0-95 RH
Inputs
Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor
24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load
Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12
Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows
Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting
POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller
APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly
OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly
WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly
Diagnostic LEDs
ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display
STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
Communication LEDs
EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications
BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications
Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active
Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed
BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open
BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed
BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed
BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed
Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
5
Boiler Pump Controller Operation
Boiler Pump Controller OperationThe Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and provides enable signaling for the boiler
The controller can operate a single boiler package or multiple boilers It can also operate a variable speed pump (with or without a redundant pump) to maintain a designated building pressure differential
Optionally the controller can provide an analog output to the boiler and control the boiler out temperature The controller can communicate via Modbus with the boiler package for status information and can receive a fault indication from the boiler package
Mode of OperationThe boiler pump controller has a power up delay during which no control action can occur This is to allow all input readings to reach a stable state before operation continues
The boiler pump controller has only two normal modes of operation
1 Off Mode
2 Run Mode
The sequence is based primarily on ldquonormalrdquo operation with exten-sions to operation where exceptional conditions are present (safeties)
Controlling the Operation ModesThe two operation modes are commanded by a combination of 4 mode control factors
1 Remote Unit RunStop Input
2 Internal Schedule
3 RunStop override via BACnetreg
4 RunStop override via the User Interface
Off ModeDuring shut down mode the boiler enable output is disabled and then the pump enable outputs are disabled The bypass valve output is then disabled
In off mode the boiler will be disabled and the boiler pump will not run The bypass valve will remain closed until the system is called to run
During off mode no control actions will occur However the con-troller will continue monitoring pressure and GPM inputs for status
Run ModeRun mode consists of the boiler producing hot water and the pump pumping the resulting water through the building hot water loop
The Remote RunStop input on the controller must be activated for the pump to enable and run If it is not active the pump will not run regardless of other commands to do so
Once the Remote RunStop input is activated BACnetreg commands can be issued Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run will make the controller enter the run mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to stop will make the controller shut-down to off mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run automatically will make the controller refer to its internal schedule to determine operating mode The internal schedule by default is ldquorun alwaysrdquo
The BACnetreg default mode being automatic and the internal sched-ule of run always makes the Remote RunStop input act as a true runstop and not just an enable
The RunStop override in BACnetreg and RunStop override via the user interface (UI) affect the same single internal conditional vari-able meaning an override issued by BACnetreg can be canceled via the UI and an override condition issued by the UI can be canceled or altered via BACnetreg
Once the pump is activated to run the boiler will be enabled Initially the runtimes of the pumps will be compared and the pump with the least amount of run time will be allowed to run Its respective louver will be energized Once the louver has enough time to open (based on time delay) the less ran pump will be energized There will be a 10-second delay (adjustable 0-35 seconds) before the pump starts to allow the boiler isolation valve to open
Once the pump starts to run the pump will start its pump VFD output at the starting percentage It will hold at this pump starting percent-age for 30 seconds The controller will confirm that the water flow differential pressure increases by 5 PSI from the off mode readings
If water flow is not confirmed within 30 seconds the pump will be deactivated and locked out If there is a redundant pump pump action will be attempted with the redundant pump
During Run Mode the pump VFD output will be modulated to maintain the designated building differential pressure
If Bypass Valve Control is configured the controller will modulate a bypass valve output to maintain the minimum flow
Once the controller has established which pump has run the least amount and is allowing that pump to run After a week it will be tested again to see if the current running pump is indeed still the least run pump overall if it is not the controller will switch at that time and allow the other pump to come on
Zone
ZoneSECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide6
Boiler Output TemperatureThe Boiler Pump Controller will modulate the boiler output to drive the boiler to control the Boiler Water Out Temperature The Boiler Output Setpoint Range set in the boiler is 80deg to 180deg There are (3) methods that can be used to reset the Boiler Output Temperature within that range With no reset the Boiler Output Temperature will be 80deg
Boiler LoadingmdashThe staging is accomplished through setpoints and when the boiler analog output reaches the max stage percent-age setpoint (default is 80) the controller will hold the analog output there for 40 seconds allowing the 2nd louver to make After the time has elapsed the boiler output will reset to 0 and return to modulating for temperature control After the 2nd boiler time delay (which is fixed) is expired the 2nd boiler will energize Both boilers can modulate together using the same boiler output until they reach max capacity of 100
Boiler UnloadingmdashOnce the controllerrsquos boiler output reaches the min stage percentage setpoint (default of 15) the controller will hold the boiler output at 15 for 40 seconds It will then reset the boiler output back to 100 and allow the first boiler to start to unload from there The 2nd boiler will shut off during this time
1 Writing to the Boiler Output Temperature Reset Point via BACnetreg
The boiler is looking for a percentage from 0-100 value written to this BACnetreg point to reset the output temperature over the 100deg temperature range
If you write a 50() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 130deg
If you write a 100() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 180deg
2 Using the Hard-Wired Boiler Reset Input This 0-10 VDC input will proportionally reset the Boiler Output Temperature between 80deg and 180deg
If you send at 1 VDC signal that will be interpreted as a 10 increase based on the 100deg reset range (10deg) So 10 would be added to the 80deg initial output temperature setpoint to produce a 90deg setpoint
If you send a 5 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 50 to produce a 130deg setpoint
If you send a 10 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 100 to produce a 180deg setpoint
3 Outdoor Air Temperature ResetIf this option is configured the Boiler Output Setpoint will be auto-matically reset between 80deg and a maximum of 130deg based on the outdoor temperature The outdoor air temperature range used for reset is 20deg to 70deg The reset amount equals 70deg minus the outdoor temperature That reset value would be added to 80deg to reset the Boiler Output Temperature
If the outside air is 50deg it will increase the setpoint by 20deg (70deg - 50deg) to a 100deg setpoint
If the outside air temperature was 70deg there would be no reset (70deg - 70deg = 0 reset)
If the Outdoor Air Temperature reset is used in conjunction with the hard-wired Boiler Reset Input then the Outdoor Air Temperature reset value would be added to the Boiler Output Temperature that has been established by the 0 - 10 VDC input signal up to a maximum Boiler Output Temperature of 180deg
If the hardwired Boiler Reset had produced a reset setpoint of 130deg (2 above) and if the outside air is 50deg then 20deg (70deg - 50deg) would be added to the 130deg setpoint to produce a 150deg setpoint
Safety ChecksSafeties represent operating conditions which may override or otherwise affect normal operation Several safeties exist to help stop continued operation when conditions which may harm the equipment are present Activation of safeties will typically trigger an alarm indication both in the Alarm Indicator output and within the BMS communications data
Manual Lockout ResetA manual lockout reset button is available from the Touch Screenrsquos Alarms Screen that will reset and retry all alarms
Boiler Fault 1If boiler 1 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger
Boiler Fault 2If boiler 2 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger
Pump VFD Fault 1A Pump VFD Fault 1 will cause the boiler pump VFD 1 to shut down after 10 seconds
Pump VFD Fault 2If two pumps are configured and the 2nd pump is running a Pump VFD Fault 2 will cause the boiler to shut down the boiler pump 2 after 10 seconds
Pump Operation MonitoringThe Boiler Pressure In and Boiler Pressure Out will be monitored for a differential to determine if the pump is functioning This opera-tion requires a pressure setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run and the boiler differential is less than 5 PSI for more than 5 minutes
Boiler Pump Controller Operation
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
7
Boiler Pump Controller IO Map
InputOutput Maps
See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs
Boiler Pump Controller
Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)
Binary Inputs
1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)
Relay Outputs (24 VAC)
1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)
2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)
3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)
4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)
5 Louver 1 (RLY5)
6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)
7 Louver 2 (RLY7)
Analog Outputs
1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)
2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)
3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals
WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block
DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs
NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor
Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs
Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease
High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down
High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out
Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes
Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler
The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs
The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies
The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg
configuration
See Figure 1 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
9
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller
Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)
See Figure 2 below for output wiring
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10
Boiler Connection Wiring
Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring
Boiler Connection Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board
The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable
The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board
The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200
See Figure 3 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
11
WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications
2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices
3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge
4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire
5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge
6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit
7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used
8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly
Important Wiring Considerations
GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring
WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2
Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements
Con
trol
D
evic
e
Vol
tage
VA
Loa
d
Ope
rati
ng
Tem
pera
ture
Hum
idit
y (N
on-
Con
dens
ing)
Boiler Controller
18-30 VAC (25-15)
Class 215 10degF to
150degF0-95 RH
Inputs
Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor
24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load
Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12
Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows
Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting
POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller
APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly
OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly
WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly
Diagnostic LEDs
ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display
STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
Communication LEDs
EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications
BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications
Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active
Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed
BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open
BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed
BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed
BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed
Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
ZoneSECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide6
Boiler Output TemperatureThe Boiler Pump Controller will modulate the boiler output to drive the boiler to control the Boiler Water Out Temperature The Boiler Output Setpoint Range set in the boiler is 80deg to 180deg There are (3) methods that can be used to reset the Boiler Output Temperature within that range With no reset the Boiler Output Temperature will be 80deg
Boiler LoadingmdashThe staging is accomplished through setpoints and when the boiler analog output reaches the max stage percent-age setpoint (default is 80) the controller will hold the analog output there for 40 seconds allowing the 2nd louver to make After the time has elapsed the boiler output will reset to 0 and return to modulating for temperature control After the 2nd boiler time delay (which is fixed) is expired the 2nd boiler will energize Both boilers can modulate together using the same boiler output until they reach max capacity of 100
Boiler UnloadingmdashOnce the controllerrsquos boiler output reaches the min stage percentage setpoint (default of 15) the controller will hold the boiler output at 15 for 40 seconds It will then reset the boiler output back to 100 and allow the first boiler to start to unload from there The 2nd boiler will shut off during this time
1 Writing to the Boiler Output Temperature Reset Point via BACnetreg
The boiler is looking for a percentage from 0-100 value written to this BACnetreg point to reset the output temperature over the 100deg temperature range
If you write a 50() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 130deg
If you write a 100() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 180deg
2 Using the Hard-Wired Boiler Reset Input This 0-10 VDC input will proportionally reset the Boiler Output Temperature between 80deg and 180deg
If you send at 1 VDC signal that will be interpreted as a 10 increase based on the 100deg reset range (10deg) So 10 would be added to the 80deg initial output temperature setpoint to produce a 90deg setpoint
If you send a 5 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 50 to produce a 130deg setpoint
If you send a 10 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 100 to produce a 180deg setpoint
3 Outdoor Air Temperature ResetIf this option is configured the Boiler Output Setpoint will be auto-matically reset between 80deg and a maximum of 130deg based on the outdoor temperature The outdoor air temperature range used for reset is 20deg to 70deg The reset amount equals 70deg minus the outdoor temperature That reset value would be added to 80deg to reset the Boiler Output Temperature
If the outside air is 50deg it will increase the setpoint by 20deg (70deg - 50deg) to a 100deg setpoint
If the outside air temperature was 70deg there would be no reset (70deg - 70deg = 0 reset)
If the Outdoor Air Temperature reset is used in conjunction with the hard-wired Boiler Reset Input then the Outdoor Air Temperature reset value would be added to the Boiler Output Temperature that has been established by the 0 - 10 VDC input signal up to a maximum Boiler Output Temperature of 180deg
If the hardwired Boiler Reset had produced a reset setpoint of 130deg (2 above) and if the outside air is 50deg then 20deg (70deg - 50deg) would be added to the 130deg setpoint to produce a 150deg setpoint
Safety ChecksSafeties represent operating conditions which may override or otherwise affect normal operation Several safeties exist to help stop continued operation when conditions which may harm the equipment are present Activation of safeties will typically trigger an alarm indication both in the Alarm Indicator output and within the BMS communications data
Manual Lockout ResetA manual lockout reset button is available from the Touch Screenrsquos Alarms Screen that will reset and retry all alarms
Boiler Fault 1If boiler 1 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger
Boiler Fault 2If boiler 2 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger
Pump VFD Fault 1A Pump VFD Fault 1 will cause the boiler pump VFD 1 to shut down after 10 seconds
Pump VFD Fault 2If two pumps are configured and the 2nd pump is running a Pump VFD Fault 2 will cause the boiler to shut down the boiler pump 2 after 10 seconds
Pump Operation MonitoringThe Boiler Pressure In and Boiler Pressure Out will be monitored for a differential to determine if the pump is functioning This opera-tion requires a pressure setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run and the boiler differential is less than 5 PSI for more than 5 minutes
Boiler Pump Controller Operation
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
7
Boiler Pump Controller IO Map
InputOutput Maps
See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs
Boiler Pump Controller
Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)
Binary Inputs
1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)
Relay Outputs (24 VAC)
1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)
2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)
3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)
4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)
5 Louver 1 (RLY5)
6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)
7 Louver 2 (RLY7)
Analog Outputs
1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)
2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)
3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals
WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block
DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs
NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor
Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs
Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease
High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down
High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out
Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes
Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler
The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs
The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies
The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg
configuration
See Figure 1 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
9
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller
Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)
See Figure 2 below for output wiring
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10
Boiler Connection Wiring
Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring
Boiler Connection Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board
The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable
The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board
The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200
See Figure 3 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
11
WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications
2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices
3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge
4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire
5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge
6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit
7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used
8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly
Important Wiring Considerations
GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring
WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2
Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements
Con
trol
D
evic
e
Vol
tage
VA
Loa
d
Ope
rati
ng
Tem
pera
ture
Hum
idit
y (N
on-
Con
dens
ing)
Boiler Controller
18-30 VAC (25-15)
Class 215 10degF to
150degF0-95 RH
Inputs
Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor
24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load
Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12
Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows
Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting
POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller
APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly
OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly
WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly
Diagnostic LEDs
ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display
STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
Communication LEDs
EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications
BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications
Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active
Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed
BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open
BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed
BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed
BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed
Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
7
Boiler Pump Controller IO Map
InputOutput Maps
See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs
Boiler Pump Controller
Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)
Binary Inputs
1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)
Relay Outputs (24 VAC)
1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)
2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)
3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)
4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)
5 Louver 1 (RLY5)
6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)
7 Louver 2 (RLY7)
Analog Outputs
1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)
2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)
3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals
WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block
DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs
NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor
Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs
Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease
High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down
High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out
Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes
Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler
The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs
The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies
The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg
configuration
See Figure 1 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
9
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller
Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)
See Figure 2 below for output wiring
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10
Boiler Connection Wiring
Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring
Boiler Connection Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board
The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable
The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board
The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200
See Figure 3 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
11
WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications
2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices
3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge
4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire
5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge
6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit
7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used
8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly
Important Wiring Considerations
GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring
WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2
Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements
Con
trol
D
evic
e
Vol
tage
VA
Loa
d
Ope
rati
ng
Tem
pera
ture
Hum
idit
y (N
on-
Con
dens
ing)
Boiler Controller
18-30 VAC (25-15)
Class 215 10degF to
150degF0-95 RH
Inputs
Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor
24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load
Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12
Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows
Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting
POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller
APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly
OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly
WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly
Diagnostic LEDs
ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display
STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
Communication LEDs
EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications
BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications
Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active
Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed
BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open
BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed
BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed
BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed
Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler
The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs
The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies
The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg
configuration
See Figure 1 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
9
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller
Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)
See Figure 2 below for output wiring
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10
Boiler Connection Wiring
Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring
Boiler Connection Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board
The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable
The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board
The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200
See Figure 3 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
11
WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications
2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices
3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge
4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire
5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge
6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit
7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used
8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly
Important Wiring Considerations
GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring
WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2
Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements
Con
trol
D
evic
e
Vol
tage
VA
Loa
d
Ope
rati
ng
Tem
pera
ture
Hum
idit
y (N
on-
Con
dens
ing)
Boiler Controller
18-30 VAC (25-15)
Class 215 10degF to
150degF0-95 RH
Inputs
Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor
24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load
Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12
Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows
Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting
POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller
APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly
OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly
WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly
Diagnostic LEDs
ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display
STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
Communication LEDs
EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications
BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications
Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active
Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed
BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open
BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed
BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed
BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed
Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
9
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller
Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)
See Figure 2 below for output wiring
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10
Boiler Connection Wiring
Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring
Boiler Connection Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board
The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable
The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board
The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200
See Figure 3 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
11
WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications
2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices
3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge
4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire
5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge
6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit
7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used
8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly
Important Wiring Considerations
GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring
WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2
Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements
Con
trol
D
evic
e
Vol
tage
VA
Loa
d
Ope
rati
ng
Tem
pera
ture
Hum
idit
y (N
on-
Con
dens
ing)
Boiler Controller
18-30 VAC (25-15)
Class 215 10degF to
150degF0-95 RH
Inputs
Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor
24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load
Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12
Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows
Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting
POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller
APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly
OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly
WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly
Diagnostic LEDs
ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display
STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
Communication LEDs
EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications
BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications
Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active
Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed
BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open
BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed
BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed
BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed
Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10
Boiler Connection Wiring
Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring
Boiler Connection Wiring
The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board
The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable
The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board
The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200
See Figure 3 below for input wiring
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
11
WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications
2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices
3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge
4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire
5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge
6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit
7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used
8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly
Important Wiring Considerations
GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring
WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2
Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements
Con
trol
D
evic
e
Vol
tage
VA
Loa
d
Ope
rati
ng
Tem
pera
ture
Hum
idit
y (N
on-
Con
dens
ing)
Boiler Controller
18-30 VAC (25-15)
Class 215 10degF to
150degF0-95 RH
Inputs
Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor
24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load
Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12
Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows
Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting
POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller
APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly
OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly
WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly
Diagnostic LEDs
ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display
STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
Communication LEDs
EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications
BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications
Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active
Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed
BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open
BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed
BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed
BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed
Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 2 WIRING
11
WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules
1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications
2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices
3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge
4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire
5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge
6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit
7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used
8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly
Important Wiring Considerations
GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring
WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2
Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements
Con
trol
D
evic
e
Vol
tage
VA
Loa
d
Ope
rati
ng
Tem
pera
ture
Hum
idit
y (N
on-
Con
dens
ing)
Boiler Controller
18-30 VAC (25-15)
Class 215 10degF to
150degF0-95 RH
Inputs
Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor
24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load
Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12
Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows
Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting
POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller
APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly
OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly
WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly
Diagnostic LEDs
ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display
STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
Communication LEDs
EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications
BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications
Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active
Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed
BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open
BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed
BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed
BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed
Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12
Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows
Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting
POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller
APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly
OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly
WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly
Diagnostic LEDs
ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display
STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active
Communication LEDs
EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications
BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications
Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active
Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed
BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open
BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed
BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed
BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed
BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed
Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
13
Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14
Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated
If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted
Thermistor Sensor Testing
TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors
The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002
25 -388 35165 3891
30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605
Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)
Temp(ordmC)
Resistance(Ohms)
Voltage Input (VDC)
74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931
Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Zone
Zone
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
15
Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion
0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart
The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors
Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced
0-200 PSIPressure Transducer
Pressure to Voltage Conversion
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
Pre
ssur
e
PS
I
Sig
nal
DC
Vol
ts
0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35
50 15 160 37
60 17 170 3970 19 180 41
80 21 190 43
90 23 200 45100 25
Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16
LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys
LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys
The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions
Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys
Table 5 Navigation Key Functions
NAVIGATION
KEYKEY FUNCTION
MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens
UP
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
DOWN
Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories
Table 6 Editing Key Functions
EDITING
KEYFUNCTION
UP or
DOWN
Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen
NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value
ENTER
Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits
Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network
MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear
A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
17
Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map
Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button
BOILER1139VXXX
ALARMSSTATUS
Press to go to the System Status Screen
Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens
Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen
Main Screens Map
SYSTEMSTATUS
Press to scroll through the System Status Screens
Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen
SETPOINT MENU
Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens
Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen
SENSOR STATUS
Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens
Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen
Press to go to the System Settings Screen
Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens
SYSTEMSETTINGS
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18
DEVICEID 15000
MSTP Baud 38400
BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400
System Settings Screens
BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
System Settings Screens
Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEM MODE
MAC Addr0 TO 127
BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0
The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp
ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9
Unit ID Addr 1-59
UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1
485-Baud HI SPEED
485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
19
System Status Screens
System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SYSTEMSTATUS
MODEOFF or RUNNING
PUMP AO
PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are
bull OFF
bull RUNNING
BYPSS AO
BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT
Louver or Made
BOILR AO
BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT
This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are
bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint
bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband
bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband
bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity
bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity
bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated
bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20
Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SENSOR STATUS
BOIL IN XXXdegF
BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED
BOIL DIF XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL
BOILSETP XXXdegF
BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
PRS IN XXX PSI
BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED
Sensor Status Screens
PRS OUT XXX PSI
BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED
PRS DIF XXX PSI
INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE
PRS SET XXX PSI
BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT
GPM
GPM STATUS
GPM SET
GPM SETPOINT
RST VOLT
RESET VOLTAGE
BOIL OUT XXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED
OA TEMP XXdegF
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
21
Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen
Alarms or No Alarms
Alarms Status Screens
NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms
ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms
WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open
Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open
PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open
Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault
HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200
Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault
LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min
BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1
BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2
ALARMSSTATUS
LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes
HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs
BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed
BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed
PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed
PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed
OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22
Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens
SETPOINTSTATUS
PRESSETP XXXPRESS
BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT
BYPSSETPXXXdegF
BYPASS SETPOINT
TEMPSETPXXXdegF
BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER
Setpoint Status Screens
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
23
BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24
BACnetreg Analog Inputs
BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name
AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output
Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
25
BACnetreg Analog Values
BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range
MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100
Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26
BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type
BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status
Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs
BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
27
BACnetreg Multistate Input
BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits
MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown
Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
APPENDIX B - BACnetreg
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
29
Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up
Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30
Touch Screen Features
FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system
The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions
bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options
bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training
bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization
bull Contains a USB port for software updates
Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
31
System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In
Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2
At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen
Help Screen
Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)
Figure 3 Main Help Screen
Logging In - Administrator Access
Figure 4 Login Screen
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again
WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32
System Overview Screen (Full Access)
After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below
Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt
The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt
Securing the System
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM
NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system
Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)
System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
33
Changing the Administrator Passcode
Figure 6 Manage Users Screen
The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen
WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt
Figure 7 New Passcode Screen
Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change
If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter
If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8
Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9
Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start
Changing the Administrator Passcode
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34
Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons
Icons and Button Functions
Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions
ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS
When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present
The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status
The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays
The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature
The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller
NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions
Button Function
No Button
Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen
Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen
The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen
Table 2 Configuration Buttons
Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions
Button Function
The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen
Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen
Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo
Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group
Table 1 Navigation Buttons
Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt
There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
35
System Settings
System Settings
At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt
Figure 10 System Settings Screen
System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions
BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units
Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops
The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired
The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling
The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC
The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application
The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes
The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician
WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED
Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Setting Schedules
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36
Figure 11 Scheduling Screen
The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours
You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen
Schedules amp Overrides
Scheduling Overrides
Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14
You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF
A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option
Figure 12 Time Selection Screen
When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event
You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt
Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days
Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Setting Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15
Figure 15 Holidays Screen
Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
37
In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text
There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months
If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays
You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day
From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16
Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays
While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window
WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution
While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller
Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38
Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen
Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen
Setpoint Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured
See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen
Figure 17 Details Screen
Details Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
39
Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations
Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen
Configuration Settings Screen
To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen
To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint
Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad
Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change
Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry
The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on
Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen
Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40
Viewing Alarm Status
To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist
There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access
Alarms Screen
Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)
The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen
The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide
APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE
41
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen Troubleshooting
Updating the Touch Screen
bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number
bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files
Communication Lost - No Comm
bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable
bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable
Sync Clock
bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012
2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094
AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved
AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom
AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM
Central Standard Time
NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available
PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative
Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012